Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

1 .Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

such as mechanical equipment. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Germany. and piping. and plumbing fixtures. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . and plumbing engineering workflows. Add more detailed modelling elements. such as duct. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. electrical panels. electrical. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. fixtures.

When you install the training files as instructed. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. NOTE Depending on your installation. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. For example. annotations. Create detail views. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. On the Contents tab. Create schedules. to provide a richer and more finished design. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. templates. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. however. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. So. and tags. When you open a training file. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. when you add ductwork. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you learn where the training files are located. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. and sheets to document the project. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. such as templates and families. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. In this exercise. You do not design entire systems. After completing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. as well as how to open and save them. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Contact your CAD manager for more information. However.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. is located and accessed in the training files location. views. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. your Training folder may be in a different location. For example.

For example. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. verify that Project Files (*. Accessing Training Files | 5 . Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 8 If you have made changes. and you can open any supported file type.rvt and make changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. click ➤ Save As. For File name. You may close the file with or without saving changes. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt) is selected. and click Open.rvt. if you open settings. scroll down. you are prompted to save the changes. and click the Training Files icon. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. a list of file types displays. For Files of type. enter the new file name. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. the Open dialog displays. and click Save. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. double-click Imperial or Metric. 4 Click the training file name. 3 In the right pane.

6 .

Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. You learn the terminology. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. ■ ■ 7 . and schedules required for a building project. scope. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. 2D and 3D view. the door retains this relationship to the partition. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. sections. In the Revit MEP model. quantities. If you move the partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the operation of the software is parametric. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. schedules. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. If the length of the elevation is changed. hence. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and plans. every drawing sheet. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the hierarchy of elements. drawings. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. drawing sheets. and phases when you need it. In this case. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is one of association or connection.

levels. For example. and electrical panels. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. filled regions. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. grids. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. walls and ceilings are hosts. and reference planes are datum elements. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. boilers. For example. and electrical panels. sprinklers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sinks. Datum elements help to define project context. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. ducts. Examples include detail lines. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ducts. For example. tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. dimensions. boilers. sprinklers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and 2D detail components. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. They help to describe or document the design.

views of the project. you must be in a section or elevation view. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. section views. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. programming is not required. top of wall. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. and ceilings. For example. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. such as roofs. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and so forth). and drawings of the design. from geometry to construction data. The project file contains all information for the building design. schedules. In other cases. elevation views. North . Often. first floor. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. or bottom of foundation. Project: In Revit MEP. and types. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. However. To place levels. for example. If you can draw. families. By using a single project file. In Revit MEP.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. floors. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you can explicitly control them. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers.

■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A type can also be a style. However. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. With a few clicks. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. For example. pipes. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. each in-place family contains only a single type. hiding. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Then experiment with them. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). showing. and similar graphical representation. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Type: Each family can have several types. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. identical use. such as a A0 title block. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Unlike system and standard component families. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. For example. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. or layer the views to see only the one on top. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can also display several project views at one time. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and wires. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. System families include ducts.

To return the panel to the ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.

Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and CAD files. and for switching views. and settings. data and systems. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. select the tool first. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for editing existing elements. architect-specific tools.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. project and system parameters..

Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides access to common tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. when adding duct. displays frequently used tools. For example. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

(Open) save the current drawing. click. select a file to open.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as Export and Publish... (Save As) export the current drawing.

click. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.. annotation. saves a current project. annotation. publish the current project. and Walkthrough. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. provides views including Default 3D. (Publish) print the current drawing. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. but is not enabled by default. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. To enable or disable a tool item. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Print) access product and license information..On the application menu. to. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file.. Camera. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family.

In addition. Clear the Status Bar check mark. This displays the command history in a list. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.To undo or redo a series of operations. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To hide the Status Bar. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Group. However. or the Family Editor. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). repeat the command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Starting with the most recent command. When you are using a command. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Modify. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. workshared components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. check the Status Bar. Clipboard. displaying the same information. To show the Status Bar again. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. when you switch to another editing mode. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. When you are highlighting an element or component. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.

use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. On the Quick Access toolbar. Place a Wall. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. select one or more elements of the same category. for example.To cancel or exit the current command. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. To change existing elements to a different type. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.

rvt. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 1 Click ➤ Open.

Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. click . 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . When you release the mouse button. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. To modify or add snap increments. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). use a zoom menu command to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. on the Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. If you do not have a wheel mouse.

click the SteeringWheels tab. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. ➤ Options. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press ESC. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Click and drag to orbit the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and then using the Zoom tool again. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. As you move the mouse. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . referred to as shape handles. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Small blue dots. and open Level 2 .Design. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. These are the drag controls. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and select the duct.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. as shown. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.HVAC Plan . display along the ends. called drag controls. 2 Enter ZR. Similar controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.

or press CTRL+Z. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 6 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. select the first item in the list. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. In this example.

11 With the duct already selected. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. for example. such as Move and Copy. In this case. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and click again to specify the ending position.Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. The duct is moved to the new position.

13 To end a command. Select Mechanical . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Return.Supply. Click OK. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.End a command Some commands. Press ESC twice. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 14 Enter VG. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. such as the Modify Ducts command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 27 . 6 Click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and loadable families. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. link files. In that case. You can either select a template from the template library. under Template file. You can choose from several templates. such as ducts and pipes. 7 In the Project Browser.rte template. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as the default project units and settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. settings. Finally. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and open Metric ➤ Templates. click Browse. create and manage views.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. system families. the default building levels and standard views. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and open North. such as coordination review and interference checking. and modify system settings. click Training files. select Project. and geometry from the starting template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. New projects inherit all the families. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. use copy/monitor. and click Open. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. under Create new.

Click Cancel. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. ■ ■ Under Create new. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. For Location. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click (Browse).rte template and click Open. review the construction materials listed. When you select the material. In the Choose Template dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. navigate to Metric Templates. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK. you can select it now.8 In the drawing area. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. For example. for Energy Data. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Project template. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Click OK twice. 10 Using the same method. (Browse). select Manchester. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. under Energy Analysis. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Browse. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. click Edit. select School or University. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ For Building Construction. create another new project using the Construction template. NH. select Level 1. for City. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.

22 In the right pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . click Wiring. Click OK twice.rfa and click Open. For Categories. under Duct Settings. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. piping. 27 Click OK. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. After standard settings have been established for an organization. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Views. for 20. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. plumbing. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 290. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and demand factors for electrical systems. click Rectangular. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 260. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 110. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.00 mm.00 mm.00 mm. power distribution systems. click Round. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 26 In the right pane. for 90. 33 Click OK. and 310. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 140. 25 In the left pane. 23 In the left pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 110. select Identity Data. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. wiring. and 140.00 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. and fire protection systems. Holding CTRL.00 mm.00 mm. for 90. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Pipe Settings. 24 In the right pane. click Sizes.000 mm. under Duct Settings.

To enable this coordination. select Auto . 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Notice that the file is saved as a template. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select View Name. From the Positioning list. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. sheets. select Sub-Discipline. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Click Open. 4 In the New Project dialog. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. families. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 38 Close the file. In addition. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select Family and Type. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Associated Level. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.Origin to Origin. click Training. Linking Projects In this exercise. under Create new. For Then by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Browse. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog.rvt. under Template file. and groups that are contained in a project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. For Sort by. For Then by. 5 Click OK. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed.

select the linked architectural model. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select Room Bounding. 8 If necessary. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.Mech. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Linking Projects | 31 . under Constraints. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Floor. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. click the level line for 03. 17 On the Options Bar. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 19 On the left side of the view. click Plan View types. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.

Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. level 3. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. and the level 4. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. highlight the linked model. a warning message displays. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 29 In the drawing area. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. and that the copied elements are monitored. After copying. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. If you modify a monitored element. appears above the copied elements. warnings notify you of any violations.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. indicating that a relationship is established. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Linking Projects | 33 . 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 34 On the Basics tab. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 27 In the drawing area. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. and click to select the linked model. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. for the link file. select Custom. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. indicating that an element has changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. click By Host View.

Under Visibility. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Edit. select Custom.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. 36 Click OK. Under Visibility. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . deselect Parking. 3 In the View templates dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. deselect Levels. 5 On the Basics tab. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Roads. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Planting. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Site. under View Properties. Click OK. click Custom. click Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . for the link file. for Name. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 7 Click OK twice. and Topography.

9 In the Apply View Template dialog. click the Graphics tab. Modifying System Settings | 35 . select Mechanical and click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. notification preferences. select Invert background color. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. journal cleanup options. 8 Click ➤ Options. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.rte. 7 Click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 5 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. under View Templates. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Browse. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. click the Graphics tab. and your username when using worksharing. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Training Files. selection default options. 3 Under Colors. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. they are not saved to project files or template files. These settings control the graphics. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 9 In the Options dialog. under Template file. 2 In the Options dialog.

For Tooltip assistance. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. family template files. select None. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. and family libraries. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 18 Select the wall. and click OK. you specify default file locations. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. However. including your default project template. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 11 In the Color dialog. click the value for Selection color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select yellow.10 Under Colors. 19 Press ESC to end the command. click the File Locations tab. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . the elements causing the error display using this color. select One hour. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Click the General tab. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 13 Under Notifications. When an error occurs. 21 Close the file without saving it. 14 Click OK. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files.

3 Under Default template file. or loading a Revit MEP file. 4 Click Cancel. However. saving. click Places. ➤ New ➤ Project. and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can start a new project with that template. You can modify the existing library names and path. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. note the list of library names. such as in a large. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. In the following illustration. 10 In the Places dialog. under Default path for family template files. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. click Browse. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. Save. click Browse. Specifying File Locations | 37 . and click Open. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. centralized. and Import dialogs. Load. Click and click Browse to select a template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. When you are opening. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 8 Click Cancel. TIP To view a template.

38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click My Library. or families. Load. templates. Save. and click OK twice. 15 Under Library Name. and Import dialogs. ➤ Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click (Browse). click (Add Value). and change the name to My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. and select it as the library path.

select Ignore words in uppercase. click OK. If you work in a large office. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Places. 3 Under Settings. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 11 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 21 On the File Locations tab. If you want to relocate this path. 19 Click Cancel. 5 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. specify the new location here. custom color files. 14 Click in the drawing area. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click Edit. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 2 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. and decal image files. 27 Click OK. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 22 Select My Library. 20 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. view the current path. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. This path is determined during installation. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 9 In the text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check.

20 Under Settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . In this exercise. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. you modify snap increments. under Dimension Snaps. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 6 In the Snaps dialog.rte. As you zoom in and out within a view. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Browse. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. 23 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click the Spelling tab. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Training Files. You can turn snap settings on and off.17 In the Spelling dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. under Template file. 19 In the Options dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you modify snap settings. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Close. work with snapping turned off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and enter 500 . 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.. 4 In the New Project dialog.

click OK. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. deselect Chain. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. For example. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom out until it does so. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and move the cursor to the right. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 10 On the Options Bar. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If it does not. such as ZO to zoom out.

21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. with or without saving it. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Click OK. and move the cursor to the right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 Move the cursor downward.. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and the wall edges. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. and delete the value 500 . 19 Enter SM.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. 26 Close the file.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. At the end of the tutorial. 45 . After finishing each exercise. you first plan the system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you design a mechanical system for an office building. However. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and then you create a plenum level. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. go to http://www. In this exercise. After applying a color scheme to the zones. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. water source heat pump (WSHP). methodology. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.autodesk. This system consists of a cooling tower. By following the recommended workflow. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. As you create the mechanical system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this lesson. you first configure the linked architectural model. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.

3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. click to select it. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 6 In the Project Browser. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Next. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Room Bounding. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and click OK. and after the linked model highlights. These components are defined in the architectural training file. ceilings. and double-click West . In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP training file. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. under Constraints. NOTE When working with a linked file.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 1 In the Project Browser. you add a level for plenums. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.MEP.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. roof. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. In this section.

and click OK. 9 On the Draw panel. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Plan View Types. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and click Properties. and enter Level 2 Plenum.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. For Offset. 16 Press Esc. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. enter 2600mm. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Preparing Spaces | 47 . A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). right-click Level 2 Plenum. The new level is placed. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser.

For Sub-Discipline. Notice that the site plan displays in the view.Plenum. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. click Edit. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . select Level Above (Level 3). select Design. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Under Identity Data. for Default View Template. In this exercise. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. you can choose to save your work. For Cut plane. for View Scale.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. ■ Click OK twice. enter an Offset of 300mm. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In the next exercise. Under View Depth. For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. However. Under Extents. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. and for Offset. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. select Plenum Plan. enter 0. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select MEP . You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Level.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Top. right-click Level 2 Plenum. NOTE After finishing each exercise.

Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For (Tag Location). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Upper Limit. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . walls. For Space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Placing Spaces | 49 . select Level 2 Plenum. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. and ceilings). click Training Files. For Offset. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. indicating that it’s the active view. enter 0. select Horizontal.rvt. select New.

enter Library. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.7 Click to place the space. 14 In the drawing area. 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). for Number. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ensuring coordination between the files. For Name. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. 21 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. enter 0. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

you place a space in a large corridor area. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and then press Esc. select Level 3.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

10 Click in the number column. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. click in the name column. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. In the schedule. 9 In the schedule. and select Corridor. which was numbered 219Q. and scroll to the newly placed space. and change the space number to 216A. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . as shown. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 15 Press Esc twice. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.Notice that the tag updates with the number change.

you place a space in a chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.16 Using the method learned previously.

click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. If necessary. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.

expand Spaces. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.4 Press Esc. select Roof Level. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. click in the chase area to place the space. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Interior and Reference. 6 Enter VG. For Offset. select Level 3. 12 Click in the section view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 10 In the plan view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 0. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click OK. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Upper Limit. right-click. In the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Upper Limit. and click Element Properties. select the space.

the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. Under Identity Data. Bounding elements (such as walls. for Name.Space Plan. floors. 15 Press Esc. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter Chase. and maximize the view. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . enter 1200. All spaces in the view are tagged. enter 225PC. under Loaded Tags. ceilings.■ For Limit Offset. and click OK. For Number. 17 Type ZF. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.

which removes the space from the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. After a space is placed in an area. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the next exercises. To display space reference lines. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. click View ➤ Zones.20 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.rvt.Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files. In this exercise. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Spaces. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assign spaces to zones in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. indicating that the space is occupiable. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and click OK. The graphic in the System Browser updates. As you do this. double-click 121 Cafeteria. click Training Files. under Energy Analysis. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. To display space reference lines. and verify the zones in the System Browser.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). The Zone tool is active. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . select Occupiable. and a new zone is created. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Next. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. the Edit Zone tab displays. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. ) or 5 In the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m.Zoning is highlighted. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you assign spaces to a zone.

■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. Instruction. Using the Edit Zone tab. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 4 In the drawing area. select Computer Lab 222. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Click OK. and click Finish Editing Zone. type VG. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical 220 spaces. Instruction 221. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and modify the zone properties. you need to activate the zone visibility. In the System Browser.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

10 On the Edit Zone tab. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Zoning. under Identity Data. 5 Click in the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. In this exercise. 11 Close the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Zoning view to activate it. enter 2 . for Name. click Finish Editing Zone. You activated zone visibility in the views. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.Zoning is highlighted. 9 In the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.Area B. and verify the zone in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . under Spaces. To display space reference lines. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m.West . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. expand 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.West . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.

Zoning floor plan. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Select Attached End. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. zoom out. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.

Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and select 109 Lounge. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. for Name Value. you verify the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and zone information. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.East. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click the corner where the Top.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. double-click the zone tag. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. enter Lounge . double-click Level 1 . 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. on the ViewCube. verify that Wireframe is selected. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. space. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Front.Zoning view. and click OK.rvt.Zoning to make it the active view. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser.

you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. you isolate the space. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. click (Isolate). Next. ■ Click (Highlight). Using the Highlight tool. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ ■ On the Details tab. With 109 Lounge selected. select 1_South_Area C. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

and click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that 23. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Building> is selected. For Construction Type. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. the space information displays for the selected space. Next. click (Shading). verify that 21. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones.22 °C : N/A is specified.22 °C : N/A is specified. and humidification set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and dehumidification set point. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ ■ Next.33 °C : 12. Next. and air changes per hour. scroll down in the left pane. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and in the People dialog. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . click . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. outdoor air per area. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.11 °C : 32. and then click OK. For People. For Cooling Information. heating air temperature. This indicates the outdoor air per person. For Electrical Loads. select 109 Lounge. For Heating Information. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. cooling air temperature. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. select Lounge/Recreation. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.

enter 0. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. open MEP .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Offset. click Cancel. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and other room-bounding components. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. roofs. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. select Level 3. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. floors. 12 Using the methods learned previously.

22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and select space Plenum 212P. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. In this exercise. enter 212P. For Name. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Under Energy Analysis. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Click OK. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. for Number. select Plenum. space. and zone information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select Plenum. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

For Building Construction. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 . and click OK. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Building Service. is selected. enter 03101. right-click. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Project Phase. under Volume Computations. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click in the Value field. under Energy Analysis. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. On the Place tab. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). for City. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Energy Data. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . For Postal Code. select space Library 219. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK twice. If. For Export Complexity. verify that Manchester. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit. For Ground Plane. For Sliver Space Tolerance. In order to select a space. On the Weather tab. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. this option adjusts the times automatically. and click Element Properties. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click OK.Space Plan. For Location. click Training Files. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.rvt. verify that 300 is specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. select School or University. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you need to select this option. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. NH.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected.

For Building Service. You have verified the building information. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. a cooling load. Select Area per person. For Latent. For Condition Type. Next. For People. For Building Construction.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that School or University is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). and then click . verify that Manchester. select Specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and click to learn the cause for the warning. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. Click OK twice. Under Power. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Heated and cooled. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. m. for Values. and enter 15 sq. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Actual. both. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. or neither. for Values. select Library . select Specified. click Edit. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. For Space Type. enter 60 W. click Edit. Click OK. verify that <Building> is specified. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Actual. and click OK. For Location. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Sensible. NH. enter 45 W. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. 12 Click the Details tab. click in the Value column.Audio Visual. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 .

Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. In this exercise. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 17 In the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. space. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 21 Click OK. under Energy Analysis. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. weather.11°C.Space Plan. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 16 After you review the loads report. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. select 219 Library. click Information).click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. There should be no warnings displayed. select 219 Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and a loads report displays. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. click Calculate. and can be modified here. space. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 19 In the drawing area. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and under Heating Information. and zone information for the building model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. or make any changes to the model. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. or zone information. You should correct the space error in the building model. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Review the loads report for project. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and click OK. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.

3 In the drawing area. in relatively small increments. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. 5 Zoom in to the legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select HVAC Zones. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. click Training Files. Click OK. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and click OK. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Cooling Load . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The new scheme displays in the view.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.Expanded Ranges.

12 Close the file with or without saving it. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.rvt. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise. click Training Files. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

In the Calculated Value dialog. For Discipline. For Phase.Space Fill is the active view. for Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Select available fields from. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Formula. more category options are available. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. and click OK. select Spaces. ■ Click Calculated Value. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula. enter Space Airflow Schedule. enter . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Spaces. select New Construction. Select Schedule building components.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Name. and then click .(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. enter Airflow Delta. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Under Available fields. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select HVAC. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Type. click (Browse). the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Air Flow. In the Fields dialog.

■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Then by. right-click to access schedule properties. select Level. ■ The schedule displays. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Under Conditions to Use. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Background Color. Click OK twice. Select Ascending. For Fields. select red. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . verify that Show is highlighted. Header. select Level. and click OK. a view opens that contains the selected space.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and then select Hidden field. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and Blank line. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Number. In the Color dialog. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and then click Conditional Format. select Airflow Delta. click the color swatch. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. For Value. select Not Between.

all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In this exercise. In the next lesson. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In later exercises. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy.

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. As you place the air terminals.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. 79 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Then. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. In this lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). and work with the airflow schedule. you modify air terminal parameters. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and scroll to space 223. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the ceiling view. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. the space crossing lines display. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. click Training Files. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.

click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. enter 215 L/s.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. type 3600. The schedule updates with the new flow data. the hosted elements are updated as well. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. as shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and select M_Supply Diffuser . and then select both Copy and Multiple. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc to end the command. and press Enter. for Flow. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Placement panel. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 17 Move the cursor down. click Place on Face. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . select the diffuser. If the host element is modified or moved. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.

82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Open dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.rfa. 28 On the Placement tab. As you place the return diffusers. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. and click Open. as shown. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 22 In the drawing area. Next. clear Leader.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. select one of the diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. click Yes. click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser .

for Reference. and click to select the lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. under Other. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 31 In the alert dialog. Level. select Strong Reference. as shown. 32 In the Project Browser. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. and then press Esc twice. 40 In the drawing area. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 43 Using the same method. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select the vertical grid line as shown. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . align the other return diffuser. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.

for Flow. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . under Mechanical. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. clear LeftArrow. and click Element Properties.44 While pressing Ctrl. and on the Options Bar. select both return diffusers. right-click. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 310 L/s. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you place the air terminals. and press Enter. and click OK. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 47 Using the same method.

200 Neck. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.HVAC Plan . 2 On the View Control Bar. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click 1 : 100. select M_Supply Diffuser . and double-click Level 1 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. for Scale. 9 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rvt. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. expand HVAC . the space crossing lines display. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.Design to make it the active view. at the lower left corner of the building. 8 In the Type Selector. 10 In the drawing area. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

As a result.Airflow. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. enter 170 L/s. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 Press Esc. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. for Offset. Also. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . Under Mechanical . type 6000. Click OK. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. move the cursor down. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. enter 2400. 11 Select the diffuser. and then press Enter. By copying the diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

18 On the Options Bar.16 Using the same method. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . clear Leader. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

25 Click OK 3 times. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Sort by. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. select Air Terminals. under Other. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. 27 In the schedule. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. and click View Properties. 26 Using the method learned previously. under Available Fields. Mark. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. for Embedded Schedule. and Flow. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter 210 L/s. type. 29 Using the same method. double-click System Type. For Category. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. mark. Type. tile the windows. and press Enter. for Flow.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. select Mark. select 21. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Next. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then right-click in the schedule. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. click Edit. it is a negative value. under space 115. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

as shown. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.Design. 31 In the drawing area. As you highlight the zone. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. and maximize Level 1 . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

3 times the heating load). 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 33 Click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. and under Energy Analysis.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 36 In the drawing area. select M_WSHP . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.7-18 kW . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.High Efficiency .43 W (approximately 1.Horizontal .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.

A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. including energy analysis. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. for Constraints ➤ Offset.rvt.HVAC Plan . the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. click Training Files. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and click OK. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. However. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. right-click the title. enter . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. the space crossing lines display. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. As you add diffusers to systems. When you highlight a space. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. You then create the logical connection between the system components. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. indicating that it’s the active view. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.Design is highlighted. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.

review the Number of Elements. 12 In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. System Name. On the Options Bar. 15 Click Cancel. 11 In the drawing area. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and the system connects them. the number of elements is updated.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 17 Using the method learned previously. Connect Into. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. the air terminals are the children. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 18 Click OK. and Flow value.

20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for System Name. 25 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. which updates the name in the System Browser. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Identity Data.Rename the system Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 22 Click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. click Training Files. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser.rvt. for Mark. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and display solution 1. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. For Flex Duct Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. enter 3000. enter 3000. 4 In the drawing area. the Network type provides several solutions. the space crossing lines display. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset. for Solution Type. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Select Branch. In this case. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Network. which provides various layout tools.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.Round. For Duct Type. select the upper left diffuser. A Generate Layout tab displays.HVAC Plan.Design is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 On the Options Bar. click Settings. For Duct Type. Also. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .

96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Either relocate the system components. enter 900. as shown. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. 11 Click Finish Layout. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as is the elbow itself. click Modify. you’ll get an error in a later step. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. For example.

a disconnection exists. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and click OK. fittings. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Usually. Using a flow-based color scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. thus it is not part of the system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. If the entire network does not highlight.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser.Flow. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. The first time you press Tab. and click to select it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . highlight a segment of the main duct. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. for Color Scheme.

Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and on the Options Bar. but not all values are used in this view. for Flow. select By View. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. select the WSHP.Airflow. select one of the diffusers in the system. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and press Enter. for Values Displayed. under Graphics. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click OK. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). under Mechanical . 20 In the drawing area. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.

and enter . select the color scheme legend. highlight a segment of the duct. for Schemes. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select the upper segment of main duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select Calculated Size Only. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Under Constraints. 26 Click OK. click Cancel. and drag it to the right. for Branch Sizing.Velocity. Click OK. and then click to select it. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and select 400. select Duct Color Fill .65 Pa/m. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Select Restrict Height. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. Select Only.

and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.The ductwork and fittings are updated. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. static pressure. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and pressure loss. pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.

You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish. also known as the critical path.rvt. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Draw Duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan .

14 In the Project Browser. for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. click the corner where the Top. enter 3000. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and click Draw Duct. Front. select the top right diffuser. 11 On the Options Bar. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 15 On the ViewCube.3D MEP. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. NOTE When drawing duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip. double-click MEP .8 Press Esc twice to end the command.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. The ductwork is automatically created. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

25 Press Esc. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.22 Using the same method. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.

for Flow. under Mechanical . and then click OK. 40 Using the same method. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. such as a plenum. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Constraints. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. and click to select it.Airflow. clear Restrict Height. select a segment of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

108 .

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you place mechanical equipment. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Create return and supply piping systems. 109 . including 2 base mounted pumps. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Then. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. on level 3 of the building model. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.

Left Return . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Horizontal High Efficiency . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.Design is highlighted. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. in corridor 328. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and select M_WSHP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.7-18kW . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.HVAC Plan .rvt.

as shown. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 600. 8 Click the corridor wall face. verify that Wall faces is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.

and in the Type Selector. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select the 2 WSHPs. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 14 Click Modify.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 0.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Under Mechanical. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. for Offset.75 L/s. enter 2750. 21 Click Modify. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

analyses cannot be performed. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. You can create pipes to connect system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .22 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you create the return and supply piping systems.

indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. and click View ➤ Piping. select the 2 WSHPs.rvt. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 In the System Browser. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. while pressing Ctrl. In the System Browser. As you assign equipment to systems.Mech 330).HVAC Plan . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. right-click the Systems column heading. where it is easier to review the information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Creating a Piping System | 115 .Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display indicates that the system is selected. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that on the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You have created the hydronic return system. and the Edit System tool is not active. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. 12 In the drawing area. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.

Design. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and click OK. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and select the cooling tower. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.HVAC Plan . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 26 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Roof . 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view. and bypasses the cooling tower. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. under Design ➤ HVAC . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In heating mode. In cooling mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 25 Select the boiler.

and click OK. and click Select. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Expand All. 32 In the System Browser. and click OK. you can view several parameters. In the System Browser. and click Properties. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. expand the Hydronic Return system category. expand Piping. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Column Settings. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 29 Right-click CHWS. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. enter 0. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. for Water Flow. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. indicating the logical connection. including the flow rate and size of the component.8. under Mechanical.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. A system preview displays in red. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .Design is highlighted.rvt. When you draw a box to select components. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). click Check None. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. then the Select a System dialog displays.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330).HVAC Plan . you can place the cursor over a system component. the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the system. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 In the Filter dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . select Mechanical Equipment.

You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. enter 450. 10 Click OK. 13 Click Cancel. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. For Inset. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. click Settings. or architectural components. structural beams. select CHWR. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. It does not reference the architecture. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 On the Options Bar. select Perimeter.9 In the Select a System dialog.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and press Tab 3 times. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. to display the path with thinner lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.75 L/s. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 19 In the drawing area. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. the flow for each WSHP is 0. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .75 L/s).50 L/s. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and access its instance properties. 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 1. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. under Mechanical. and click OK.50 L/s. notice that the Water Flow is 1. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical.

28 In the Project Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. double-click Level 1 . 27 On the System Tools panel. Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System.HVAC Plan . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). click Edit System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Number of Elements is now 8.Design.

44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.94 L/s. and click Cancel. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.94 L/s. as shown. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. note that the value for Flow is 4. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. you physically close the CHWR loop. 35 Using the drag control. 38 Using the same method.50 L/s.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. which propagates flow throughout the system. Next. under Mechanical. access its instance properties. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. so the total flow of 6. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.

enter 0. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. Click Settings. select a WSHP. 41 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select CHWS. enter 450.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then click OK. For Inset.00%. 40 In the Select a System dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. For Slope. select Perimeter 1 of 5. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS).

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In a later exercise. (Both sections are at the same elevation. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 47 In the drawing area.

select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 .49 Select the 4-way arrow control. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. or manually modify the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or offset elevations are incorrect. 50 Using the same method. as shown. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution.

Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and the return pipes are magenta.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. double-click 3D Building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. As you work in the training file. click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. as shown. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

Click to specify the reference point. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and click OK. The connections are automatically created. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. and click Draw Pipe. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 12 In the 3D view. select the boiler. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.11 In the Select Connector dialog. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.

if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ Move the cursor down. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.In a plan view. and you select 1 connector. for Offset. and press Enter. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 381. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 600. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

19 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and the appropriate fittings are created. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and click OK. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. As you place piping runs that are close together. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click the minus symbol. and click to draw the pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom connector. and select it.

and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .27 Move the cursor to the right.

and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .28 Press Esc. 29 If necessary. enter 1200. select the primary base mounted pump.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. as shown.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .■ Move the cursor down. type 300. for Offset. enter 2850. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter. and click to create the pipe.

you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Next. You now have a closed loop system.

The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click OK. Connect the cooling tower Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. select the cooling tower. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. view the properties for the secondary pump.44 L/s). notice that Flow is 6. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. 43 Press Esc.44 L/s. 44 In the 3D view. under Mechanical. 48 In the plan view.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 42 Click OK. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. right-click. The flow is being propagated through the piping. notice that under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. which is rounded up to 3. In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. and click Element Properties. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. for Cooling Water Flow. When you create the pumps in parallel.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. the value is 0 L/s. right-click.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .44 L/s. and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 50 In the 3D View. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.52 Close the file with or without saving it. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.HVAC Plan . Adding Valves In this exercise. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. When the valve is open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and is heated by the boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.

50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The bypass valve is closed by default. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and select M_Ball Valve . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Adding Valves | 145 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.4 On the Options Bar.

parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc.

validate that the Flow is 6. 19 Using the same method. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.44 L/s. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. and click OK. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). under Mechanical.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. right-click. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Adding Valves | 147 .

) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. click Training Files.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).44 L/s. Initially. 20 Select the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. and select M_Ball Valve . You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select M_Ball Valve .44 L/s. In heating mode.rvt. validate that the Flow is 6. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 22 Using the method you just learned.

as shown. for Schemes. select Pipe Color Fill .Design is highlighted. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 149 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Flow. click Pipe Color Fill .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size.HVAC Plan . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK.

IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Click OK. Select And. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.5 m/s. select Friction. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). or offset elevations are incorrect. 13 Press Esc. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and for Velocity. Under Constraints. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. for Branch Sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select a different layout solution. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. enter 1. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and enter 220 Pa/m. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. or manually modify the pipe. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select the branch.

and double-click 3D Building. Using the System Inspector. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspecting the System In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.14 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspecting the System | 151 . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design. as shown. as required. An inspection flag reports the section number. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. and pressure information including pressure loss. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.

and to size pipe. 9 Using the same method.4 Pa. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 10 Click Finish. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Note that the Flow is 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. and double-click Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. you need to validate them. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.7. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan .rvt. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. In this exercise. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.0 L/s. Warnings display. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. select 32° C.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. targeting those systems that need attention.Design. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. for Fluid Temperature. inspect Section 6 again. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.1 Pa. click Training Files. the Static Pressure is 41916.

HVAC Plan . 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. After you assign components to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and select Level 3 . and click Expand All. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and click View. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 12 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. thus assigning the components to a system. As you learned when placing components. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. click Close. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. right-click the Systems titlebar. TIP If you have multiple views open. right-click Hydronic Return. 7 In the System Browser.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and confirm unassigned system components. After you have assigned all components to systems.Design floor plan. 4 In the System Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 10 Using the same methods. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. the pipe is associated with that system. and for pipe sizing. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. For example. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.HVAC Plan . double-click Level 1 . otherwise.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. For Factor. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. ■ ■ For Material.Wire Sizes. click (Open). select Copper. enter 70. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. wiring. Select Correction Factor. select 90. You also add a wiring type. expand Wiring . distribution systems. For Temperature. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. speeding up the design phase. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. enter THHN. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Wiring Types. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. For Material. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. and demand factors that are applied in the design.04. enter 1. As you place components and create circuits.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Demand Factors. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 250. select 240.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. For Conduit Type. enter 220. For Neutral Multiplier. enter 50. select Single. select Power. For Neutral Size. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . select Distribution Systems. By specifying a range. Click Split. Select Neutral Required. enter 1. For L-G Voltage. select THHN. For L-L Voltage. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Wires. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Phase. Under More Than. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. Click OK. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. select 120. enter 240. select Voltage Definitions. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 120/240.0. select Hot Conductor Size. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select 3. For Maximum. For Insulation. For Minimum. enter 2000. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Value. select 75. select Steel. select 10000 VA. For Max Size. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 240. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor.

Later in the tutorial.Lighting Plan. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Under Categories. click (Open). For Discipline. For Type of Parameter. 5 In the drawing area. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Training Files. Verify that Instance is selected. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. select Spaces.Lighting. select Illuminance. select Electrical . under the Electrical . Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. restrooms. select Electrical. such as offices.rvt. and conference rooms. In this case the key style is the type of space and. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.Lighting group in the space element properties. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. enter Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. click Add. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group Parameter Under. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and double-click Level 2 .

note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Available Fields. enter Lighting Levels. enter 485. Click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. enter Space Lighting Requirements. select Spaces. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Select Schedule Keys. and click OK. and for Key Name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. double-click Required Lighting Level. For Name. enter Open Office. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category.Lighting. under Electrical . 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

Notice that as you enter the data. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. 21 Click OK twice. click Edit. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 22 Using the same method. for Sorting/Grouping.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. select Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Select Blank Line. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. change the sort order back to the default setting. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. which is mapped to project units. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .

since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. under Identity Data. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Later in this exercise. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. for Lighting Levels. the value input applies only to the selected space. select Instruction-Standard.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. click (Open). 27 Click OK. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. In this exercise. that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Under Schemes. enter 800. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00 lx.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. enter Required Lighting Levels. click (Duplicate). for Name. Select the scheme for At Least 20. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and press ENTER. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes.00 lx. and click (Add Value). 00 lx still selected. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.00. For example. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and press ENTER. and press Enter. Select the scheme for 500 lx. for Title. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. then the new value will be 400 lx. ■ Click OK. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. verify the By Range is selected. For Color. click (Add Value) again. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. click Training Files. select Required Lighting Level. enter 900. and click (Add Value) five times. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. for Category. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.rvt. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . and click OK to dismiss the alert message. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. enter 200.00. Select the scheme for 450.00 lx. and in the At Least column.

8 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Name.Lighting CF. Average Estimated Illumination. and double-click Level 2 . double-click Number. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . For Type. 13 Click Calculated Value. for Available Fields. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. select Spaces. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. For Name. Click OK. For Discipline. select Required Lighting. For Color Scheme. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Electrical.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. and Required Lighting Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Lighting Delta. Level. select Illuminance.

■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ For Formula. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. for Fields. For Value. select Required Lighting Level. for Custom Colors. and click Browse. Select Blank Line. click Browse. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. under Condition. press the spacebar. Click Conditional Format. Click OK three times. for Formula. select Lighting Delta. Click OK twice. Click Background Color. for Test. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. On the Formatting tab. for Sort by. select Not Between. Select Header. select Level. select Red. select Average Estimated Illumination. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. type a hyphen. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Then. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. 171 . you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. First. Create power loads. power circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule. as you place lighting fixtures.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Basic Colors. click Training Files. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. select Orange. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Average Estimated Illumination. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You can create additional color schemes. for the Spaces Category. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Under Scheme Definition. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. By using orange as the color for this range.rvt. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select the color legend.Lighting Ceiling plan.Lighting CF view is open. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Click OK. In the Color dialog.

5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. which is the lowest value in the specified range. zoom to space Library 219. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.

The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 20 Select the lighting fixture. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.277V. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly.the +/. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.5 fc range is satisfied. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) .5 fc range. 18 Click to place the fixture.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.00 VA. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219. for Name enter and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. enter 162. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Apparent Load. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. ■ Under Electrical Loads.

85. enter . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter F15. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color.00 lm. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. select Xenon and click OK. and receptacles to your design. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Junction Boxes. In the Select File dialog. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. In the next exercise. for Type Mark. select the top center fixture. Placing Switches.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. 2 In the drawing area. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Click OK. and Receptacles | 183 . for Lamp. select 463T5_S. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. junction boxes. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click (Open).rvt. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the value for Initial Intensity. for Ballast Loss Factor. specify 15000. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.93. you add switches. ■ Click Apply. select T5 [HO]. and click OK. enter . 9 In space Library 219. ■ Click OK twice. select Luminous Flux. Junction Boxes. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Placing Switches. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.ies and click Open. click Training Files. Under Photometrics.

7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .

Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Select M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad. 9 Press ESC to end the command.rfa and click Open. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches.

zoom to space Library 219.Offset. for Mark. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. 15 Select the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Click OK twice. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Level 2 . 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical. note the Number of Poles is 1. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.14 Press ESC to end the command. enter 2750. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter JB-1NL.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click Edit Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 21 In the drawing area.

26 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Placing Switches. right-click and click Column Settings. Select Load. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Space Number. Click OK.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space Name. Junction Boxes. NOTE If necessary. and Number of Elements. Select Size. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 24 For any column. 23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand General. Distribution System. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage.

31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. move the cursor along the wall. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 43 Press ESC to end the command. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

48 Close the file with or without saving it. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

208V MCB . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. click (Open). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.Surface: 100A. and work toward the higher voltage. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . #1 Pole Breakers. 8 Select the panelboard. Click OK. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Distribution System. for Distribution System. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter LP-2B. for Max. 14 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye. for Max. 7 Press ESC to end the command.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter 20. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B. select 120/208 Wye.480V MCB . 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK.

and for Category. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. 23 In the Filter dialog.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. 28 Press ESC to end the command.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

38 Press ESC to end the command. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. except without wire.rvt. click Check None. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4.Loads. select Wires. and for Category. for Hot Conductors. and create permanent wiring. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.39 Using the same method. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 2. click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

Distribution System. Rating. Expand Electrical. Click OK. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and verify that Load. Voltage. and then expand circuit 1. right-click on the Systems heading. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 13 In the System Browser. expand Power. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected.

20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. under Electrical. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Click Tags. change the Voltage to 277V.

■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click Yes. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . click Edit Type. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. For Circuit Number. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 47 In the drawing area. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. under Identity Data. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select Break. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter FR4. 40 Click OK twice. Click OK. notice the label parameters and click Cancel.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . click below the first one to place it.

click (Open). and for Category. 52 In the Save As dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you create a switch system. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 57 In the Filter dialog. Click Save.rvt. 54 Select all of the tags. Click OK. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. for File Name. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. enter a comma. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tags. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply.rfa. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Training Files. Click OK. and click Apply. click Check None. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.

2 In the drawing area. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical Lighting. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . for Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. under Electrical . 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.Lighting. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. for switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter b.

click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. Click OK. select the PP-2B panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. select Electrical Fixtures. enter 2. click Check None. click Training Files. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and for Category. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. lighting.Loads. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Circuits are used for power. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. and data systems.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 In space Electrical 220. 4 In the Filter dialog. and click Element Properties. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 2 In the drawing area. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. Next you create a circuit and size wire.

for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the drawing area. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click to select the circuit. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and click Open. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wiring.13 Select the wire again.

24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 22 In space Electrical 220. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . select the PP-2B panel. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. enter 30A. click Open. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Had there been a greater imbalance. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 2 In the drawing area. 1-#12. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select panel LP-2B. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#12. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Click OK. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 3 In the Electrical space. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. the distribution is shifted. 1-#10. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Scroll down. Under Electrical-Loads. zoom to space Electrical 220. Finally. for Rating. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. 6 Click OK. After re-balancing loads. click Training Files. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#10.

17 Close the warning dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. select the transformer TP-2B. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Next you create a panel schedule. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 40A. and click OK. enter 25A. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Rating. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click OK. for Rating. 24 Click Select Panel.Loads. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. under Electrical . Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.

NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Edit. 5 In the Project Browser. under Other. 4 Close the report. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Select PP-2B. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click (Open). you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. for Font Size. enter 5 mm. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Under Header Text. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. for Appearance. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Click OK. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.rvt. and open E601 . for Font Size. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . for Font. select Bold and Italic. enter 4 mm.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. select Berlin Sans FB. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 In the Project Browser. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. expand Sheets (all). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text. 10 Click OK twice. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.Panel Schedules. Under Body Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. each with a load of 180VA. In the System Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. click (Open). and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Expand Unassigned. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

23 Close the file with or without saving it.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. select MDP-1. Checking Your Design | 215 . under Warnings. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. 15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 20 On the Options Bar. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. for Panel. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. zoom to space Electrical 214.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

you create a PVC pipe type.rvt. planning is critical to a successful design. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .Vent. 219 . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. right-click PVC . click Training Files. Adding a pipe size. in addition to loading existing families. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. In this lesson. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. click Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. type PVC . and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.Sanitary. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

13 In the right panel. click Pipe Settings.PVC . 6 Click OK.Sch 40 . 27 For the new pipe size. for Material. enter 10°. 26 Click OK. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.293 mm. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Branch. and open Metric\M_Trap P . select Sanitary. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 45. 25 For Outside. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 46.rfa. 18 For System Type.006 mm. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Plastic. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 17 In the left pane. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. click Training Files. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. PVC . under Mechanical. 10 On the Selection panel. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter -1250. Tap. select Tee. click Modify.DWV. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.000 mm. 21 In the right pane.PVC . enter 54.5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Main. select Sanitary. 15 For System Type. For Offset. Cross.Sch 40 .PVC . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.DWV: Standard. select M_Tee Sanitary . 24 For Inside Diameter. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. and click OK. for Nominal. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .Vent is listed. In the Project Browser.DWV: Standard. select None.Sch 40 . under Pipe Types. 22 Click New Size.

Create the cold water system. including plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. add a hot water heater. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. Create the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select Sanitary 107. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. The base is placed. for example. a toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 26 For Pipe Type. 28 On the Options Bar. 24 For Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and click Settings. and for Offset. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. The default settings are automatically modified. enter -1225. click Solutions. enter -350 mm. for Diameter. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -350 mm. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter 1. 29 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. select 100 mm. select Branch. 25 In the left pane.Sanitary. and click OK. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 30 Click Modify. select PVC . You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 27 For Offset. select Main. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Slope. You accept this suggested solution. select PVC . select Intersections. and modify it to meet project requirements. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Sanitary.05%. 23 For Pipe Type. for Solution Type. 21 On Options Bar.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. as shown.

37 On the Generate Layout panel.36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Overall. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . in the Type Selector. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. under M_Lavatory . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. select 560 mmx560 mm .Public. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

2. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 711. On the Options Bar. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. select Multiple.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Press Esc. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Click the 3 sinks. enter 711. and press Enter to create the third sink. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.2. 12 In the drawing area.

Design ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Editing System. as shown. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . double-click 3D Plumbing . 20 Select the fitting. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 19 In the 3D view.16 On the Edit System panel. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 21 Select the tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. In the System Browser. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. with the tee fitting selected. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. for Slope. press Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 24 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. enter 760 mm. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.22 In the plan view. enter 1. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 27 Click Modify. for Offset.05%.

Sch 40 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe. click to place the fitting.PVC . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. enter 150 mm. and press Enter. enter 305 mm. for Offset. 37 Select the fitting. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. you add pipe segments to the double wye. right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. zoom in to the double wye fitting. on the Options Bar. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. as shown. 40 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view. press Spacebar. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 48 Click Modify. right-click the bottom connector. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. enter 150 mm. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 52 In the plan view. 51 In the Type Selector. under M_Trap P . 54 Click Modify. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 53 Using the same method.PVC .DWV. 55 In the 3D view.Sch 40 .

and press Enter. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. enter 150 mm.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method. In the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click in the plan view. Click Modify. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and click Draw Pipe..

while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. In the Type Selector. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. under Pipe Types. as shown.

64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and verify the slope. 62 On the Options Bar. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. verify that 1. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . adjusting the sanitary stack. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.05% is selected. click Training Files. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Slope. click Finish. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design. 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Section view. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Design. as shown.Plumbing Plan . 10 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . 5 Select the tee. and click to draw the pipe. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Pipe. click Modify. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Overall. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 On the Selection panel. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the vertical stack. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Floor level line. select the elbow fitting on the right. right-click the top connector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.PVC . select Standard. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .DWV.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

After finishing each exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and click Duplicate. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you can choose to save your work. In this tutorial. 267 . you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You create a new pipe type. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. click Training Files. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 2 Right-click Standard. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. go to http://www. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.

Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Offset. select Main. select Carbon Steel. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. structural beams. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Pipe Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Rename. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. duct. For System Type. and then click OK. verify that 2800 is specified. 9 Click OK. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. In the next exercise. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Next. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For System Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. or architectural components. and click Properties. However. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is selected. under Mechanical. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. In this exercise. For Offset. select Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. for Material. For Pipe Type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise.

Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Using a crossing window. and then click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. For Group parameter under. under Fire Protection. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. for Name. enter Sprinkler Zone. Under Categories.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . right-click. enter Zone 1.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the drawing area.rvt. the space crossing lines display. and click Element Properties. 5 Click OK twice. select Fire Protection. select Spaces. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Add.

and then click OK. click Training Files. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 13 Using the same method. to which you add various parameters. you create schedules for sprinkler design.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 2. and click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. for Sprinkler Zone. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection.

for Name. For Key name. Click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click the Formatting tab. For Units. For Name. select Length. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . The schedule displays. select Maximum Spacing. 10 In the Format dialog. 6 Using the same method. select mm.Design is highlighted. 7 Click OK. For Unit symbol. select Millimeters. Obstructed-Combustible. For Rounding.Fire Protection Piping Plan . double-click on each column separator. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Select Schedule keys. For Type of Parameter. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter Maximum Spacing. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. click Add Parameter. and on the ribbon. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Light. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Protection Area Construction Type. and click Field Format. 14 Select the new header. select 0 decimal places. 11 Click OK twice. indicating that it’s the active view. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select Fire Protection. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Spaces. Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Group parameter under.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter 4575. select Spaces. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. and press Enter. Click OK. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 40. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically. For Name.

The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Number. For Discipline. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Area. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Click OK. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 20 On the Formatting tab. In the Fields dialog. select 0 decimal place. select Common. enter Minimum Sprinklers. and click Field Format. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. and click OK. For Rounding. 22 Click OK twice. under Available fields. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Minimum Sprinklers. click . Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Formula. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Type. select Fixed. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Units.

Select Header and Blank line. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. and then click Field Format. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. select Hidden field. and select Totals only. and click View Properties. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. select Level. At the bottom of the dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Number. For Fields. select Level. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Minimum Sprinklers. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select Hidden field. for Sort by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Select Header and Blank line. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.

34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Click OK twice. On the Formatting tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Fields. For Category. System Name. select Count. for Filter. select Calculate totals. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Sprinklers. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only. for Embedded Schedule. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. delete the word Maximum. for Filter by. click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times.27 In the drawing area. under Other. click Edit. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. right-click the schedule. and Count. select Level equals Level 2. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. double-click Type. select Grand totals. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Embedded Schedule. for Available fields.

When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 48 In the floor plan.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select space 221 Instruction. 44 In the schedule. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 50 Access the instance properties. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. for Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. As a result. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. select Ordinary.Fire Protection Plan Design. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. but their values are not determined. 41 In the plan view. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. 43 Click Cancel. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. double-click FP . select Light. select Ordinary. under Identity Data.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. As you create the system. At the end of this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and double-click Level 2 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 279 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. methodology. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.autodesk. After finishing each exercise. As you place the sprinklers. By following the recommended workflow. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you will understand the process. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. click Training Files. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. However. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. If the tutorial training files are not present.rvt.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. After placing the initial sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When this happens. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.

select the sprinklers that you placed. and 207. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 206. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 13 On the Options Bar. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 10 Press Esc twice. while pressing Ctrl. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. 9 In space Instruction 202. Also. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.

18 Type WT. you place non-hosted sprinklers. as shown. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 In the Project Browser. you place non-hosted sprinklers. open Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Piping Plan .15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and 200C). Next. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 200B.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . specify a vertical offset. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and then press Esc. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. In the next exercise. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and click Element Properties. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. for Offset. For Number. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. In this exercise. move the cursor to the right. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down.19 In the floor plan. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. enter 4100. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). After creating the logical connection. you adjust the offset.0. Notice that the schedule updates. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Next. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 11. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and press Enter. 29 Press Esc. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . enter 2900 mm. and with piping (physical connection). Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.FP_Ceiling view. This number is determined in the schedule. 25 Click OK. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.

Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. click View ➤ Systems. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 Right-click the header. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. As you assign sprinklers to systems. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. as shown. and select Piping. However.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Unlike logical connections (systems). indicating that it’s the active view. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. click Training Files. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

Next. within the Piping Systems folder. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. select an initial piping layout. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and click Select. place the cursor over a sprinkler. indicating the logical connection. named Fire Protection Wet. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . 11 With the system still selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and select the system. press Tab. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.

click Solutions. In the left pane. verify that Main is selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select 150 mm. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. For Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for System Name. click Place Base. verify that 2800. for Diameter. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . as shown. When the layout is finished. system equipment. providing system editing tools. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 23 For Offset. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 15 In the drawing area. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. For Pipe Type. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.The Edit Piping System panel displays.Wet is selected. click Settings. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. enter -3650. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and number of elements in the system. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and a piping layout preview displays. 13 In the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 19 Click OK. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm).0 is specified. select Branch.

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. In general. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and select solution 4. click Modify. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. and green represents branch lines). The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type.

select a different layout solution. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 32 If necessary. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 29 Click Finish Layout. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Either relocate the system components. or that offset elevations are incorrect.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. or manually modify the pipe. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . as shown.

you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Next. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and select the elbow fitting as shown. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 1 In the Project Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. the Connect Into tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Training Files. and then you create piping to physically connect them.33 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools.Design is highlighted.

click Add To System. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. radiators. 5 In the drawing area. 8 In the corridor. mechanical equipment. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and pipe or duct is created. or a system component to display system tools. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 9 On the Edit System panel.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. air terminals. you can select the pipe or duct. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 14 Close the System Browser. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. verify that Solutions is selected.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select solution 5. for Solution Type. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Network is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 .11 On the Generate Layout panel. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and then tile the views. 21 In the Piping Plan. 13 Click Finish Layout. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.

pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. and then press Esc. 28 In the drawing area. 25 Select the sprinkler. select 2800. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . right-click. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar.24 In the Piping Plan. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

Because the whole system highlights. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. select 1 : 50.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Fire Protection Piping Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 31 In the plan view. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . click Training Files. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Scale. indicating that it’s the active view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

double-click on the section head to open the section view. and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 Right-click.

and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. Under Identity Data. enter FP Section_Stair. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and press Enter. 22 In the drawing area.Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Fire Protection Plan . click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe. right-click Design ➤ FP . for Sub-Discipline.Design. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select Hose Reel Cabinet .Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. select Design.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Press Spacebar. select MEP Section. 19 Make Level 2 . 12 If necessary. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and then right-click the top connector.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. 14 Select the tee fitting. drag the top section boundary line up. and then click Modify.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 17 Move the cursor up. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. enter 2135. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. For Default View Template. for View Name. Click OK. select FP . Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 .

Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select . and then click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.23 In the section view. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 24 Select the cabinet. for Diameter. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel.

verify that M_Gate Valve .rfa. and click Open. click Yes to load a family. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. 32 In the Open dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . and then click Modify. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 33 In the Type Selector. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.29 Close the section view. 31 In the alert dialog.50 mm is selected. as shown.

You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view.Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. height. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. or height.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. and click OK. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). width. 4 In the floor plan view. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. Changing the diameter. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Filter dialog. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. 8 Click Modify. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . click Check None. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. width. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. select 25mm. starting at the lower left corner of the wing.

Press Esc. 17 On the View Control Bar. They display only in the view in which they were placed. and after each segment highlights. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. and click Open.rfa. 18 In the 3D view. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. . NOTE Tags are view specific.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 12 If necessary. select the linked architectural file. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. Clear Leader. click to place the tag.

The main piping is selected and displays in red.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. press Tab. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . and when the section highlights. for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 100mm. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment.

select 40mm. and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. for Diameter. as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. 24 In the drawing area. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. For additional practice. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. you created a wet fire protection system. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags to pipes. In this tutorial. In this exercise.

304 .

add annotations and dimensions. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 .

306 .

you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 307 . you begin the construction documentation for the building project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. dependent views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. under Floor Plans. If the view included detail graphics. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. matchlines. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and view references. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. right-click Copy of Level 1. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. 2 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.rvt. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.

and click Rename. and click OK. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 9 Click OK.rvt. as shown. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 4 Using the same method. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. more focused. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and click OK. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. views and put them on the sheet. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 7 Close the file without saving. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. click Training Files. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 10 In the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Apply Default View Template.

Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 13 Press Esc twice. select black. In the Color dialog.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 19 In the drawing area. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 14 Click Finish Matchline. click the current value. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. For Line Pattern. and then press Esc. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select 11. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. and click OK. For Line Weight. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Double Dash . select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color.

and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. on the Options Bar. as shown. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view. 25 Using the same method. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.20 Select the upper view reference and. 21 Using the same method.

Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing Isometric. 4 In the Project Browser. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. right-click 3D Plumbing. and select the section box. enter Plumbing Isometric . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.rvt. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click Training Files. 27 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Domestic Water. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and zoom to each of the view references. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 2 Zoom in. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. For Default View Template. for View Name.

right-click Plumbing Isometric . select 3. For Sub-Discipline. select Documentation. 6 In the Project Browser. For Pattern. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for View Classification. Click OK. 10 Right-click. select Plumbing. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.Domestic Water. and then click OK. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Apply Default View Template. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. select Dash.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click to select it. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. press Tab 3 times. 13 Using the same method. and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

specify Plumbing . click on the Format value.16 Press Esc. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. For Slope. verify that Common is selected. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.Sanitary Waste. 19 Using methods learned previously. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. On the View Control Bar.5mm Arial. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . select 1. and for Default View Template. and in the Type Selector. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Isometric. and in the view properties. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .rvt. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. as shown. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. you use a plan view to create a callout view. select To the nearest 10.■ In the Format dialog. When the view is associated with a sheet. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Press Esc twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and then place the callout view on a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. for Rounding.

Creating Callout Views | 317 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 5 On the Options Bar. select 1 : 50. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. for Scale.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

double-click M601 . and select the viewport. under Sheets (all). 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Expand the Callout Boundary category and.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. for Line Weight. Click OK. drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . using the same method.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. For Default View Template. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. right-click the callout view. For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space.

and click OK. under Names. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Rename. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 26 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

322 .

323 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. symbols. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. as shown.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. work with model-based components. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. duct tags. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Annotations In this exercise. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 9 Press Esc twice.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 8 With the text still selected.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. a return diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. verify that Leader is cleared. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. and then click Right Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. 16 In the drawing area. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 325 .

22 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. clear Leader.rfa.17 Click Modify. under Category. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. as shown. 25 In the drawing area. click Load. for Ducts. and click Open. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 24 On the Options Bar. If necessary. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 20 In the Tags dialog.

31 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. 32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and Attached End.26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select Horizontal. Creating Annotations | 327 . and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP.

select Free End. as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 34 In the drawing area. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 36 Press Esc twice. for Leader.33 On the Options Bar.

and lock lighting fixtures. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Creating Dimensions | 329 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 37 In the drawing area. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and all elements of that type are affected.rvt. 40 Using the method learned previously. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. not simply an instance property. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. That’s because you changed a type property. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. select the last tag placed. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. and click OK. lay out. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 12 Click EQ. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. select the dimension line. On the Options Bar. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 14 Using the same method. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.5 Click to create a permanent dimension.

rvt. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. click Training Files. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. and notes. annotation symbols. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 Press Esc. and offset them from the wall. enter 2430. 20 Using the same methods. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. linework. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Creating a Legend | 331 . Because the dimensions are locked.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line.9). and press Enter. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. enter Diffuser Legend.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . select Floor Plan. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. click below the title to place the diffuser. select 1 : 50. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Scale. 5 Click in the drawing area.200 Neck.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View.

11 Press Esc.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 . and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

The selected detail lines are now thin. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 21 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 26 Press Esc.

and then click Modify. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Creating a Legend | 335 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 34 Using the method learned previously. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation .MECHANICAL LEGEND.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Title w Line .39 With the viewport still selected.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. click Training Files. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A drafting view using detail components. 337 .113 East elevation view. detail groups. and text. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A detail callout that references another view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.

Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method. 7 Drag the Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click to place it. Next. clear Leader. select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 4 On the Options Bar. and then modify and align the views.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . select the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Right-click. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. and click Activate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Press Esc. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data.

and select Title w Line . 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Press Esc. and click Activate View. 21 Using the drag control.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you add wiring to the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. right-click. select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.

select 6. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Chain is selected. and click OK. expand Lines.113 North view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Line Styles dialog. for Name. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .rvt. notice that there are no snaps active. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. In the New Subcategory dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click New. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. for Line Weight. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . enter Electrical Power. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Modify Subcategories. as shown. click Training Files.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. As you draw. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 11 Using the same method. enter 3mm. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown. for Offset.10 Press Esc. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.

so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 31 While pressing Ctrl. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. and select 1. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click above the cap. 33 On the Options Bar. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

0. 40 Press Esc. and press Enter. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter 7. for Offset. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. change the length of the bottom line to 3. enter 12. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click on the length dimension value. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Using the same method. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . Press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. and then press Esc. enter 3. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. 42 On the Options Bar. you can ensure that they stay together. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. TP-2B. select all 3 lines. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 51 Using the method learned previously. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click OK. for Name.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 52 Select the detail group. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 46 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 50 With the group selected. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. enter Ground. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. while pressing Ctrl. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 47 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

and will place it on sheet E01. In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 8 On the ViewCube. 5 Right-click the copy. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 3 Select the section box. and double click Typical Make Up Air. Walkthroughs. and click OK. and then press Esc. and click Apply View Template. click Home.rvt. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click the corner where the Top. click Training Files. and Left sides converge. for Name. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Rename. select 3D Views. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Back. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 2 Zoom in to view the section.

label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3D HVAC Iso. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click OK. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .■ ■ Under Names. 15 Using the same method. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.18 Press Esc. and under Extents. as shown. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Complete the text labels. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and then click OK. To rotate and reposition a text label.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 33 Right-click the view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 On the View Control Bar.rvt. and under Extents. scroll down.25 Click OK. click Training Files. and click Activate View. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Place a detail component. and click OK. 29 Right click the view. select Crop View and Section Box. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and click Deactivate View. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Instance Properties.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. right-click the view name. 12 On the Element panel. 13 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. click the point at the top of the drain. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). For View Classification. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. as the rectangle start point. 9 Zoom in to the component. Click OK. select Documentation. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). for Sub-Discipline. and click Properties. as shown. select 1 : 5. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For Scale. Click OK. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. for Type.P. Concrete.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 With the filled region still selected. 20 Select 1. and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify. 21 In the drawing area. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.I. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and click OK. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.

and then click to select them. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 31 On the Options Bar.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select Multiple. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the filled region. 34 Press Esc. (Line). 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 In the drawing area. 28 Click Modify. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.

and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 40 Click Finish Region. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .

Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Flashing Membrane_F. 45 Using the method learned previously. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. as shown. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.. select the Flashing Membrane group. for Name. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 49 Click Modify. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then click to select them. (Rectangle). 52 In the Create Group dialog.D.

61 Using the same method. as shown. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. press Spacebar twice. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 55 Press Esc.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the grips to resize the masking region. 64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.62 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.

select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 81 Select the text note. 76 To select the leader start point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 71 Click Modify. select 15000 (Division 15 .Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and click to specify the second leader point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 72 If necessary.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. 90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc twice. select the view title. and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful